<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=LynneN</id>
	<title>TinkerMill Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=LynneN"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php/Special:Contributions/LynneN"/>
	<updated>2026-04-28T16:45:28Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.33.4</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Teaching_Classes&amp;diff=28431</id>
		<title>Teaching Classes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Teaching_Classes&amp;diff=28431"/>
		<updated>2021-05-28T22:14:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Getting Paid for Teaching a Class */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Would you like to teach a class, hold a workshop or give a talk on a subject you think people would find interesting? TinkerMill would love to host you!  We encourage all our members to teach. Everyone knows enough about something to teach a class, give a workshop or give a talk on something. You don't need to be a TinkerMill member to use the space if it's something of value and that fits with our mission. TinkerMill supports the expansion of knowledge in all areas.  We only ask that you steer clear of two subjects:  Politics and religion.  We have nothing against either; there are simply plenty of other places for those two subjects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to schedule a class at TinkerMill ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Your Meetup account needs Event Organizer permissions to allow you to create new events. Contact Ron Thomas, our Executive Director, to have those permissions added. &lt;br /&gt;
* You will need to use a computer to schedule a Meetup rather than a tablet or phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# General Event Details&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to the [https://www.meetup.com/LongmontHackerSpace/events/calendar/ TinkerMill MeetUp calendar] and identify an appropriate day for your event.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click on the &amp;quot;[http://www.meetup.com/LongmontHackerSpace/events/?action=new Create event]&amp;quot; button in the upper right corner. &lt;br /&gt;
## Write a title for the MeetUp in the &amp;quot;Title&amp;quot; field. Please be specific.&lt;br /&gt;
## Select a date, time, and duration for the event to occur.&lt;br /&gt;
## Write a description that sounds interesting and fun. Use the image icon to insert an image. Be descriptive, but concise. Cover what the topic is, what you'll be doing in the class and what the attendee will leave with, if anything.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you are charging for the event, list both the member and non-member class fees in the description. The member fee for a class should always be less than the non-member fee.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you are providing materials, list them and their cost (if any) in the description. Say how you will collect payment (e.g., included in class fee or paid separately.)&lt;br /&gt;
## If the event is taking place at TinkerMill, choose &amp;quot;TinkerMill on Delaware Pl&amp;quot; from the &amp;quot;Location&amp;quot; field &lt;br /&gt;
## Enter the specific room or location where the event will take place in the &amp;quot;How to find us&amp;quot; field. (e.g. &amp;quot;TinkerMill Classroom&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Welding Shop&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;We'll meet out front&amp;quot;, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
## You will be listed as the host by default. Note that you will show up in the MeetUp as an attendee and as unpaid. That is how it should be unless you have actually paid. &lt;br /&gt;
# Optional Settings&lt;br /&gt;
## If you plan to offer this event on a regularly recurring basis, you can choose the &amp;quot;Repeat event&amp;quot; option. You can always return to the MeetUp page at a later time, copy the MeetUp and set it for any date you choose. As the event host, you are personally responsible for cancelling your event in advance if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
## You can ask a question of those who RSVP by selecting, &amp;quot;Ask members a question&amp;quot;. However, Meetup does not require an attendee to answer the question nor does it appear when using the Meetup mobile app.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you would like to limit the number of attendees, select &amp;quot;Attendee limit&amp;quot;. Event hosts are counted within the number of attendees, so the limit should be set to the total number of hosts and potential students.&lt;br /&gt;
## Consider whether to close RSVPs in advance of the event if you need advance time to prepare.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you are charging for this event, set the appropriate options under &amp;quot;Event fee&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
### TinkerMill strongly recommends using PayPal for class payments. If PayPal is selected, the attendees will be required to pay via PayPal at the time of RSVP.&lt;br /&gt;
### Set the amount to charge for the class - this is what ''members'' pay. The description should explain the non-member charge and how it is to be paid.&lt;br /&gt;
### Set a refund policy if you wish. However, refunds must be offered if the event is canceled or rescheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
# Finalizing&lt;br /&gt;
## Click &amp;quot;Save as draft&amp;quot; if you wish to finish the MeetUp form later.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click &amp;quot;Publish&amp;quot; and review all information.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click Announce Meetup to publish the class to the MeetUp community.&lt;br /&gt;
## Once a class has been created, you can still edit the details, copy it and offer it on another date and time, share the event on Facebook, or export it to a calendar from the options underneath the class name when you click on the event.&lt;br /&gt;
## If you make a change to the class listing in any way please notify all those who have responded.&lt;br /&gt;
## Meetup will track signups, and you can interact with those who sign up through email. After the event, those attending can leave messages or click &amp;quot;good to see you&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Draft of Best Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
So that all members have equal opportunity and fair treatment we offer these Best Practices to guide the process. It can be a little tricky in a spontaneous and collaborative environment, so these practices are what we strive to uphold. If you'd like to change any of these, please attend an Admin meeting, held monthly. Check the MeetUp calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Definitions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Class'' means an instructor is offering instruction on a particular subject on a particular date, place and time...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Scheduled'' means the class has been put on Meetup and advertised...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''By appointment'' means you have agreed with an instructor to meet one on one or more at a particular date and time...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Member'' means a dues paying member of the Tinkermill, regular, student, family or corporate...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Class Tips ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Choosing a date for a class ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the TinkerMill [http://www.meetup.com/LongmontHackerSpace/events/|TinkerMill MeetUp calendar] and choose a date at least a few days away so that people can plan to attend your class. &lt;br /&gt;
* Check other classes already scheduled for that day to determine whether the resources (space/equipment) you need are available. &lt;br /&gt;
* In the RSVP settings, you can specify a group size limit. You as the scheduler will count as one. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Charging for a Class ====&lt;br /&gt;
Class fees for '''members''' should always be less than for non-members. Make any differences in fees clear in the description. MeetUp only provides for one fee level. This should be the member's fee. Include when and how the additional payment, if any, can be made by non-members. There is a credit card payment kiosk available at the front desk for convenience. Or you can accept a check at class time and submit it with the class attendance sheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Getting Paid for Teaching a Class ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Please complete and submit a [https://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf Form W-9]. For security of your SSN or EIN, please deliver W-9 directly to the Treasurer or slide it under the Executive Director's office door.&lt;br /&gt;
* NEW: The combined class attendance and instructor payment request form is here [[:File:Instructor_and_class_record_TM(1).pdf|Instructor and Class Attendance Form]].  This form can also be found on the computer in the front office.  Have your students fill out the form.  Add your own information as the instructor.  Turn the completed form in at the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
* OLD: There are [https://drive.google.com/file/d/0B90zAzxLw0nHYmFLNjktdUdjNFU/view?usp=sharing Class Attendance Sheets] and [https://docs.google.com/document/d/1889v3gptWOiESZ_2uTsxORfsZ6dK3PtZhrhdf6ivtD0/edit?usp=sharing Instructor Payment Request Forms] available online and in the front office. Have both available at the beginning of your class session to note who is attending, their contact information, and how and what they pay. After your class is finished, turn it in at the front office. You are responsible for ensuring that your students pay for your classes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Instructor payments are typically processed once per month.&lt;br /&gt;
* Instructor payments are only issued after all students for the class have paid. Ensuring that all students have paid before submitting the instructor payment request will greatly expedite your payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Acquiring and paying for materials needed in a class ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Decide whether you want students to purchase supplies separately or have that price built into your class costs. &lt;br /&gt;
* List in the description the materials or tools needed for the class, if a class kit is provided, and its cost (if any). Include when and how this is to be paid. &lt;br /&gt;
** Note: If you would like TinkerMill to provide any materials, discuss this with the captain of the shop associated with your class. We have lots of supplies in-house and can purchase just about anything else. Make sure to obtain approval from the shop captain and supply a list of what you need in plenty of time to obtain it for your class if appropriate. &lt;br /&gt;
* If your class will use TinkerMill equipment, 50% of the post-expense proceeds will go to TinkerMill and 50% will be paid to the instructor. If your class is using only the TinkerMill building and no TinkerMill equipment, 20% of the post-expense proceeds will go to TinkerMill and 80% will be paid to the instructor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frequently Asked Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Can I waive the member fee for another shop captain when the captain joins a scheduled class?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: No. For scheduled classes, all members should be paying the same. However, you are always welcome to give someone a private lesson ''by appointment'' and negotiate a different arrangement. &lt;br /&gt;
# ''Who gives the certification classes?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Any member who feels comfortable teaching the material and who has been approved by the appropriate Shop Captain.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Can I market a class outside of TinkerMill's Meetup?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Absolutely! Feel free to advertise your class on social media and to your existing list of contacts.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Do I have to require RSVP when scheduling a class?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: No. But experience shows that doing so increases the chances of attendance.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''I've been offering classes but not requiring PayPal when registering. Do I need to require payment at the time of registration?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: It's entirely up to you, but it would probably make things simpler. Depending on your own policy on no-shows and how many have signed up. E.g., if there is a line of people that want to take your class you are more likely to make it mandatory payment.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''How can I request a class?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Post a request to the appropriate Slack channel. If none seem appropriate, use the General channel.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''If a non-member takes a class and pays as a non-member and the class provides a certification, do we make them take the class over if they become a member? &lt;br /&gt;
#: ie: Julio takes Basic Soldering and he's not a member. In a few weeks he becomes a member. Do we make him take the class over for his certification? &lt;br /&gt;
#: The big reason we don't allow non-members to use the certified-only equipment is because we don't have a good way of tracking certifications for non-members. That being said, if someone joins shortly after a class and we're easily able to confirm that they took the class, you can award them the cert.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''My class will require extra space and table or two. How do I go about &amp;quot;claiming&amp;quot; that space and tables for my class?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: '''Scheduled classes''' have precedent. Slack is one way. Post a message to the General channel. You could also add that info to the class description on MeetUp. Then, set out signs on the table/s you need in the space you need the night before.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Someone is giving a class in a space and using equipment I needed to use today. How can I be informed of when classes will take resources I need to use?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Check the MeetUp calendar. Bookmark it. Refer to it when equipment needs are critical to you. '''Scheduled classes''' have precedence.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''What is the best way to learn about classes?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: There are a number of ways. The best way is to check the MeetUp calendar. If you are a member and have access to Slack, leave a message in the most appropriate channel. Check around the shop that interests you for a sign or brochure about the shop and upcoming classes. Ask the Shop Captain whose contact info should be present in the shop space or in the Slack &amp;quot;Captains&amp;quot; channel. If a brochure or sign doesn't exist, you can work with the Captain to create one!&lt;br /&gt;
# ''How do waitlists work?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: When someone cancels, Meetup offers you the slot. You could also come at the class time and see if there are no shows that day that you can take the space for.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''How do you know if I'm certified - how can I check if I was certified on the most current equipment?''&lt;br /&gt;
#:&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Can anyone use the soldering tools whether they are a member or not?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Anyone can use the electronic soldering irons. (Gas fueled soldering torches always require certification.)&lt;br /&gt;
# ''How does one know if a tool requires certification?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: The easy answer is to ask the shop captain. There should be a sign or color code to indicate if a certification is required to use a tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''I am not a member of TinkerMill but I'd like to take classes there. What is the policy?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: As a non-profit, TinkerMill makes all classes open to the public. However, you will find that members always will pay the same or less for a class than non-members. &lt;br /&gt;
# ''I am not a member but have taken a TinkerMill class that certifies use of a tool (laser cutter, e.g.). Can I now use that tool?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Related: ''I am a jewelry maker and am away from my home shop temporarily. I am not a TinkerMill member. Is there a way I can use the flex-shaft at TinkerMill for a few hours to finish a piece?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Non-members may use a tool during the certification class at the instructor's discretion. To use it at any other time, you must also be a current TinkerMill member. Consider joining the starving hacker/student membership level for $25/mo. Upon submitting the documentation and paying your first month's fee, you are a fully-fledged member.''&lt;br /&gt;
# ''I am not a member but I have some projects for which I'd like to use the TinkerMill space. I'd do it at home, but I don't really have a good working space. They're craft things, no tools necessary besides a glue gun, a paint brush, and a razor. Is there a chance I could bring my stuff and work on it there? What do I need to do?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: As a non-profit, we are open to the public provided a member is present. As long as you bring your own materials, you can work on the tables in the main room. Dues are only $50 a month and starving artists are $25 a month with a couple hours of community service. Non-members wishing to use the space are highly encouraged to sign up, if only for one month. The classes are also open to the public. You must sign a waiver at the front desk before coming in.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Is the Tinkermill space available for meetings or small groups? I.e. are we able to rent out a room or a space?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: Yes. As a non-profit, we are open to the public provided a member is present. There may be a small usage fee depending on the situation. Contact info@tinkermill.org.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''When is payment for a class required?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: If payment is not required by PayPal when you sign up on MeetUp, then there should be an answer in the class description. If not, leave a message to the class organizer on the MeetUp page. &lt;br /&gt;
#:Some classes allow you to pay when you arrive at TinkerMill for the class: &lt;br /&gt;
#::By card: Use the card reader attached to the iPad at the front desk (if you use this, please write down your transaction on the clipboard). &lt;br /&gt;
#::By cash or check: Place the payment in an envelope, write your name, amount, and what it is for on the front of the envelope, and deposit that into the mailbox at the front desk area.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''I'm offering a class that has a materials list. What is the best way to handle that expense?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: There are a few ways you can handle that. &lt;br /&gt;
#:1. Make a detailed list of needs and ask the shop captain to acquire the materials. Then the amount TinkerMill spends for those materials will be deducted from the gross proceeds from the class and before the calculation of the instructor fee.&lt;br /&gt;
#:2. Buy the materials yourself and ask students to pay for them separately - in which case you keep the payment. &lt;br /&gt;
#:3. Buy the materials yourself, get the receipt signed by the appropriate shop captain and submit it for reimbursement.&lt;br /&gt;
#:4. Buy the materials yourself, calculate the fee you need to charge each student for a &amp;quot;materials kit&amp;quot; and include that in your stated Meetup charge for the class. Create a separate invoice for the total kit fees collected and submit it along with the paperwork for the class. TinkerMill has to account for kit fees separately from instructor fees.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Are any online classes offered?''&lt;br /&gt;
#:Not actually online classes but we do share information on our website. Also check the wiki for the shop you are interested in. Some class materials are available there.&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Why is homework required before even taking a class?''&lt;br /&gt;
#:There are some classes that have so much information that needs to be learned before using the tool, requiring the homework ahead of time, lets the instructor know you are ready to have a hands on lesson. Otherwise the instructor is spending hours going over material you can learn at your own pace, on your own time.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;quot;I am an instructor for a class. Do I need to pay for it too?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: No. Unless you want to!&lt;br /&gt;
# ''Some equipment has an &amp;quot;RFID&amp;quot; access. How do I get that access?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#: All TinkerMill members are asked to attend a New Member Orientation. This is where we discuss some of the more important points of being a TinkerMill member and where we provide you with an RFID badge and a TinkerMill.org email address. If you have already submitted your new member paperwork and your first dues payment, you should sign up for the next New Member Orientation. They're typically held on the first and third Wednesdays of the month and you can always see when the next one is scheduled by checking the [https://www.meetup.com/LongmontHackerSpace/events/ TinkerMill Meetup Calendar]. Then you must take the certification class and your RFID will be added so that you can use the tool.&lt;br /&gt;
# '' What kind of credential do I need to teach at TinkerMill?''&lt;br /&gt;
#: No official credential is needed. If you have learned something you'd like to share. Do so. Please.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
10/5/2016 - Note from Lynne: The above represents bits of a number of threads from recent slack and other discussions that refer to holding classes. Many questions posed above do not yet have answers, because I didn't see an answer or know how to answer them.  I suggest there be a vetting of them perhaps at an Admin meeting by shop captains to resolve questions/conflicts and to develop an agreed-upon set of best practices.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:Instructor_and_class_record_TM(1).pdf&amp;diff=28430</id>
		<title>File:Instructor and class record TM(1).pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:Instructor_and_class_record_TM(1).pdf&amp;diff=28430"/>
		<updated>2021-05-28T20:48:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: New combined instructor reimbursement and class attendance worksheet&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;New combined instructor reimbursement and class attendance worksheet&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4162</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4162"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T04:58:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples (shown without 3D simulation and without stitch points):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples (shown with 3D simulation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FillStitchSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which can be filled with like any other closed shape or can be filled with a variable width satin stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Making a Plan =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you digitize your design, you really should make a plan first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's say you found a great picture you want to embroider like this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://image.freepik.com/free-vector/cartoon-chicken_6996-1070.jpg|cartoon chicken]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create a sewing plan before you digitize.  How much detail do you want to preserve?  How many colors do you want to use?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have broken up the design into 10 parts shown below.  You can assign a different color to each section.  Or you can make shades of colors by changing the stitch directions or fill patterns of different sections with the same color.  For example, sections 1 and 2 can be the same color.  Sections 3, 4, and 5 can be the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Pull Compensation Into Your Design ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are filling an area with stitches, you are guaranteed to see some tugging at the edges making your filled shape slightly narrower in the direction of stitch travel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PULL COMPENSATION ACTUAL EXAMPLE &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compensate for this narrowing by either using the settings in the software to add pull compensation to your stitch file or you can add overlaps between abutting shapes to fill in the potential gap:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANOTHER ACTUAL EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use both approaches: use the pull compensation settings in the software and add in some overlap between abutting shapes in your design.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we work through the chicken example, consider where we should be adding in overlaps between shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sewing Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want the design to stitch from items furthest away from view to closer items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 1 and 2 can be stitched in the same color and should certainly be stitched first.  The filled shapes should extend under the yellow body so that there will be no gap between the body and the feet and comb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 3 and 4 need to be stitched next.  Because section 4 is further away from the eye, you could choose to stitch it before section 3.  And like the red sections, you should have which section is stitched first extend under the following section so there will be no gap between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now as for the wing (section 5), you can choose to either sew it directly on top of sections 3 and 4 or you can choose to create a hole which will be under the wing.  If you use a hole, then the stitching will be less dense and thus a little more pliable under the wing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HolesOrNot.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same decision should be made for the eye.  You can stitch the white eye on top of the yellow body, but it will be a little thicker and thus a little more stiff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eye should be stitched with section 6 in white first.  The black part of the eye (7) can be stitched next followed by the eye outline (8) or vice-versa.  The outline (8) should overlap both section (3) if there is a hole under the eye and section (6).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other possibilities are to stitch the white of the eye first followed by section (3) assuming there is a hole where the eye is and then later section (8) which should overlap both (3) and (6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beak should be stitched last by stitching section (9) followed by (10).  Section (9) needs to extend under section (10) to eliminate any gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Traveling Stitches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For faster stitching, we can add a traveling running stitch from the left to the right foot or vice versa.  This running stitch will be covered by section (4) so it won't be seen.  But it will keep the machine running instead of forcing it to stop and trim the thread between feet which can be a slow process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Starts and Stop ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that we have a plan, we can start creating our stitch file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import Image ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Magic Wand ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using Built-In Shapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drawing Shapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Holes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import Vector Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colors ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stitch Direction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tie-Offs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Good Digitizing Practices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sew from Center Outwards ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digitize for Sewing Speed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4161</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4161"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T04:57:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples (shown without 3D simulation and without stitch points):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples (shown with 3D simulation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FillStitchSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which can be filled with like any other closed shape or can be filled with a variable width satin stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Making a Plan =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you digitize your design, you really should make a plan first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's say you found a great picture you want to embroider like this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://image.freepik.com/free-vector/cartoon-chicken_6996-1070.jpg|cartoon chicken]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create a sewing plan before you digitize.  How much detail do you want to preserve?  How many colors do you want to use?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have broken up the design into 10 parts shown below.  You can assign a different color to each section.  Or you can make shades of colors by changing the stitch directions or fill patterns of different sections with the same color.  For example, sections 1 and 2 can be the same color.  Sections 3, 4, and 5 can be the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Pull Compensation Into Your Design ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are filling an area with stitches, you are guaranteed to see some tugging at the edges making your filled shape slightly narrower in the direction of stitch travel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PULL COMPENSATION ACTUAL EXAMPLE &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compensate for this narrowing by either using the settings in the software to add pull compensation to your stitch file or you can add overlaps between abutting shapes to fill in the potential gap:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANOTHER ACTUAL EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use both approaches: use the pull compensation settings in the software and add in some overlap between abutting shapes in your design.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we work through the chicken example, consider where we should be adding in overlaps between shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sewing Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want the design to stitch from items furthest away from view to closer items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 1 and 2 can be stitched in the same color and should certainly be stitched first.  The filled shapes should extend under the yellow body so that there will be no gap between the body and the feet and comb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 3 and 4 need to be stitched next.  Because section 4 is further away from the eye, you could choose to stitch it before section 3.  And like the red sections, you should have which section is stitched first extend under the following section so there will be no gap between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Holes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now as for the wing (section 5), you can choose to either sew it directly on top of sections 3 and 4 or you can choose to create a hole which will be under the wing.  If you use a hole, then the stitching will be less dense and thus a little more pliable under the wing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HolesOrNot.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same decision should be made for the eye.  You can stitch the white eye on top of the yellow body, but it will be a little thicker and thus a little more stiff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eye should be stitched with section 6 in white first.  The black part of the eye (7) can be stitched next followed by the eye outline (8) or vice-versa.  The outline (8) should overlap both section (3) if there is a hole under the eye and section (6).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other possibilities are to stitch the white of the eye first followed by section (3) assuming there is a hole where the eye is and then later section (8) which should overlap both (3) and (6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beak should be stitched last by stitching section (9) followed by (10).  Section (9) needs to extend under section (10) to eliminate any gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Traveling Stitches ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For faster stitching, we can add a traveling running stitch from the left to the right foot or vice versa.  This running stitch will be covered by section (4) so it won't be seen.  But it will keep the machine running instead of forcing it to stop and trim the thread between feet which can be a slow process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Starts and Stop ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that we have a plan, we can start creating our stitch file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import Image ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Magic Wand ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using Built-In Shapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drawing Shapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Holes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import Vector Files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setting Properties ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colors ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stitch Direction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tie-Offs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Good Digitizing Practices =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sew from Center Outwards ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digitize for Sewing Speed ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4160</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4160"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T04:54:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples (shown without 3D simulation and without stitch points):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples (shown with 3D simulation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FillStitchSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which can be filled with like any other closed shape or can be filled with a variable width satin stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's say you found a great picture you want to embroider like this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://image.freepik.com/free-vector/cartoon-chicken_6996-1070.jpg|cartoon chicken]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create a sewing plan before you digitize.  How much detail do you want to preserve?  How many colors do you want to use?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have broken up the design into 10 parts shown below.  You can assign a different color to each section.  Or you can make shades of colors by changing the stitch directions or fill patterns of different sections with the same color.  For example, sections 1 and 2 can be the same color.  Sections 3, 4, and 5 can be the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Pull Compensation Into Your Design ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are filling an area with stitches, you are guaranteed to see some tugging at the edges making your filled shape slightly narrower in the direction of stitch travel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PULL COMPENSATION ACTUAL EXAMPLE &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compensate for this narrowing by either using the settings in the software to add pull compensation to your stitch file or you can add overlaps between abutting shapes to fill in the potential gap:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANOTHER ACTUAL EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use both approaches: use the pull compensation settings in the software and add in some overlap between abutting shapes in your design.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we work through the chicken example, consider where we should be adding in overlaps between shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want the design to stitch from items furthest away from view to closer items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 1 and 2 can be stitched in the same color and should certainly be stitched first.  The filled shapes should extend under the yellow body so that there will be no gap between the body and the feet and comb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 3 and 4 need to be stitched next.  Because section 4 is further away from the eye, you could choose to stitch it before section 3.  And like the red sections, you should have which section is stitched first extend under the following section so there will be no gap between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Holes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now as for the wing (section 5), you can choose to either sew it directly on top of sections 3 and 4 or you can choose to create a hole which will be under the wing.  If you use a hole, then the stitching will be less dense and thus a little more pliable under the wing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HolesOrNot.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same decision should be made for the eye.  You can stitch the white eye on top of the yellow body, but it will be a little thicker and thus a little more stiff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eye should be stitched with section 6 in white first.  The black part of the eye (7) can be stitched next followed by the eye outline (8) or vice-versa.  The outline (8) should overlap both section (3) if there is a hole under the eye and section (6).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other possibilities are to stitch the white of the eye first followed by section (3) assuming there is a hole where the eye is and then later section (8) which should overlap both (3) and (6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beak should be stitched last by stitching section (9) followed by (10).  Section (9) needs to extend under section (10) to eliminate any gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For faster stitching, we can add a traveling running stitch from the left to the right foot or vice versa.  This running stitch will be covered by section (4) so it won't be seen.  But it will keep the machine running instead of forcing it to stop and trim the thread between feet which can be a slow process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stitch Direction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Starts and Stop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Digitizing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that we have a plan, we can start creating our stitch file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Import Image ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Magic Wand ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using Built-In Shapes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Drawing Shapes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Holes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Import Vector Files ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Properties ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Colors ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Stitch Direction ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tie-Offs ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4159</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4159"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T04:45:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples (shown without 3D simulation and without stitch points):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples (shown with 3D simulation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FillStitchSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which can be filled with like any other closed shape or can be filled with a variable width satin stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's say you found a great picture you want to embroider like this one:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://image.freepik.com/free-vector/cartoon-chicken_6996-1070.jpg|cartoon chicken]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to create a sewing plan before you digitize.  How much detail do you want to preserve?  How many colors do you want to use?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
I have broken up the design into 10 parts shown below.  You can assign a different color to each section.  Or you can make shades of colors by changing the stitch directions or fill patterns of different sections with the same color.  For example, sections 1 and 2 can be the same color.  Sections 3, 4, and 5 can be the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Adding Pull Compensation Into Your Design ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are filling an area with stitches, you are guaranteed to see some tugging at the edges making your filled shape slightly narrower in the direction of stitch travel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PULL COMPENSATION ACTUAL EXAMPLE &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compensate for this narrowing by either using the settings in the software to add pull compensation to your stitch file or you can add overlaps between abutting shapes to fill in the potential gap:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ANOTHER ACTUAL EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use both approaches: use the pull compensation settings in the software and add in some overlap between abutting shapes in your design.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As we work through the chicken example, consider where we should be adding in overlaps between shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want the design to stitch from items furthest away from view to closer items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 1 and 2 can be stitched in the same color and should certainly be stitched first.  The filled shapes should extend under the yellow body so that there will be no gap between the body and the feet and comb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sections 3 and 4 need to be stitched next.  Because section 4 is further away from the eye, you could choose to stitch it before section 3.  And like the red sections, you should have which section is stitched first extend under the following section so there will be no gap between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Holes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now as for the wing (section 5), you can choose to either sew it directly on top of sections 3 and 4 or you can choose to create a hole which will be under the wing.  If you use a hole, then the stitching will be less dense and thus a little more pliable under the wing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HolesOrNot.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The same decision should be made for the eye.  You can stitch the white eye on top of the yellow body, but it will be a little thicker and thus a little more stiff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The eye should be stitched with section 6 in white first.  The black part of the eye (7) can be stitched next followed by the eye outline (8) or vice-versa.  The outline (8) should overlap both section (3) if there is a hole under the eye and section (6).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other possibilities are to stitch the white of the eye first followed by section (3) assuming there is a hole where the eye is and then later section (8) which should overlap both (3) and (6).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The beak should be stitched last by stitching section (9) followed by (10).  Section (9) needs to extend under section (10) to eliminate any gaps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For faster stitching, we can add a traveling running stitch from the left to the right foot or vice versa.  This running stitch will be covered by section (4) so it won't be seen.  But it will keep the machine running instead of forcing it to stop and trim the thread between feet which can be a slow process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stitch Direction ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing Tools =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drawing Shapes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Holes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:HolesOrNot.PNG&amp;diff=4158</id>
		<title>File:HolesOrNot.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:HolesOrNot.PNG&amp;diff=4158"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T04:14:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG&amp;diff=4156</id>
		<title>File:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ExampleSewingPlan.PNG&amp;diff=4156"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T03:52:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4154</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4154"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T03:27:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples (shown without 3D simulation and without stitch points):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples (shown with 3D simulation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FillStitchSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which can be filled with like any other closed shape or can be filled with a variable width satin stitch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing Tools =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG&amp;diff=4153</id>
		<title>File:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ManuallyPlacedStitchesExample.PNG&amp;diff=4153"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T03:24:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4152</id>
		<title>File:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:VariableWidthColumnSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4152"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T03:09:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:FillStitchSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4151</id>
		<title>File:FillStitchSamples.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:FillStitchSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4151"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T02:59:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4150</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4150"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T02:44:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag following a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing Tools =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4149</id>
		<title>File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4149"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T02:44:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: LynneN uploaded a new version of File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4148</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4148"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T02:34:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LineStitchingSamples.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag following a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing Tools =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4147</id>
		<title>File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LineStitchingSamples.PNG&amp;diff=4147"/>
		<updated>2019-12-31T02:30:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4143</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4143"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T17:40:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lynne's cheat sheets: CHEAT SHEETS&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag following a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing Tools =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= All the Other Stuff! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Letters and Monograms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Circular Repeats ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4142</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4142"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T17:33:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag following a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Free Standing Lace =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appliques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Patches =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Red Work =&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4141</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4141"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T17:32:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the Trace Pixel Art or Trace Bit Map.  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lines can be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, a motif or a &amp;quot;bean&amp;quot; stitch.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Closed shapes can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.  You can set the stitch direction of these fills.  Here are some examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag following a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And you can enter stitches by hand, like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Making a Plan ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Order ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Traveling Stitches ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Other Settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4140</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4140"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T17:07:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality that Embrilliance lacks.  You can create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Design: Considerations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple image that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to better convey the logo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread trims will there be?  Thread trimming causes the machine to slow down.  If you will be doing production embroidery, then the faster the design stitches the better.  You can reduce the overall stitching time by reducing the number of thread trims and color changes.  Sometimes you can add a line of running stitches between one block of stitching and another of the same color in order to eliminate a thread trim.  These &amp;quot;travel&amp;quot; stitches should be in an area which will be stitched over later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How many thread colors will there be?  On a machine with 6 needles, it is more efficient to keep your total number of colors to 6 or fewer.  If you are looking for two shades of a similar color, you can stitch areas using different stitch directions or fill patterns to create different looks with the same color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the design in vector format? This can simplify the digitizing process greatly.  You can use Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape to create .ai or .svg files.  Embrilliance will usually read both formats.  However, the simpler the file the greater the chance of success.  Keep in mind that if you have two overlapping closed shapes, these can be converted to two overlapping areas of stitching.  If you want the two areas to abut, then the closed vector shapes should also abut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not have vectors for your design, you can create them in Embrilliance, Inkscape, or Adobe Illustrator.  In Embrilliance, you use the Magic Wand tools.  In Inkscape, you can use the ...  In Adobe Illustrator, you use the Image Trace tool.  In all cases, you will end up with vectors with too many nodes.  You get the best shapes when using a minimum number of nodes.  So it is recommended that you clean up your vectors before converting them to stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4139</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4139"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T01:24:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality to create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Digitizing a Simple Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine we have a simple logo that we'd like to convert to an embroidery design.  How do we approach this?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Considerations ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How big do we want our final design to be?  Typical over-the-pocket logos are designed to fit within a 4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot; hoop.  Large back-of-a-shirt designs can be much larger, but could become quite dense and stiff.  They also take much longer to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How much detail do we want to preserve in the stitched design?  It can become impossible to preserve tiny details in a design.  Sometimes a simplification of the design is needed to convey the logo...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thread cuts - how many thread cuts will there be?  Thread cuts cause the machine to slow down...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do you have a version of the logo in vector format? ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4138</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4138"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T01:12:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Resources */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excellent tutorials abound on the internet for learning Embrilliance.  I highly recommend subscribing to the following on YouTube:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/BriTonLeap Embrilliance by BriTonLeap]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.youtube.com/user/LisaSewBubbles LisaSewBubbles (Lisa Shaw)]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PE-Design NEXT ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have PE-Design NEXT available to use on the Textiles PC.  It requires the use of a dongle which should already be attached.  PE-Design can also be used to create new designs.  However, its interface is a little more cumbersome to use than Embrilliance so I (Lynne Newberry) feel that Embrilliance is the better product to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, PE-Design does have some functionality to create designs based on photos.  You are welcome to use this software at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MANUAL for the software can be downloaded [[:File:Pednext ug01en.pdf| here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SewArt Embroidery Digitizer ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have SewArt installed on the Textiles PC.  This is fairly inexpensive software for digitizing.  The MANUAL can be downloaded [[:File:SewArt Manual.pdf| here]].  You can download a demo from their website [http://sandscomputing.com/products-shop/sewart-embroidery-digitizer/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== InkStitch extension to Inkscape ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're feeling adventurous, you can try adding the [https://inkstitch.org/ Ink/Stitch] extension to [https://inkscape.org/ Inkscape] and use it to create designs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:SewArt_Manual.pdf&amp;diff=4137</id>
		<title>File:SewArt Manual.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:SewArt_Manual.pdf&amp;diff=4137"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T01:05:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:Pednext_ug01en.pdf&amp;diff=4136</id>
		<title>File:Pednext ug01en.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:Pednext_ug01en.pdf&amp;diff=4136"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T01:01:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: PE Design NEXT manual&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;PE Design NEXT manual&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4135</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4135"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T00:51:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Embrilliance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual for the software can be downloaded from the Embrilliance website [https://embrilliance.com/downloads here] or directly [[:File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf|here]].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf&amp;diff=4134</id>
		<title>File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:EmbrilliancePlatformWin1161.pdf&amp;diff=4134"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T00:33:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: Embrilliance manual for Windows&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Embrilliance manual for Windows&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4133</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4133"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T00:30:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Embrilliance */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embrilliance is an embroidery software package with several modules which add different kinds of functionality.  TinkerMill has purchased the following modules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://embrilliance.com/embrilliance-essentials Essentials]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://embrilliance.com/products/enthusiast Enthusiast]&lt;br /&gt;
#[https://embrilliance.com/stitchartist Stitch Artist] Levels 1-3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Essentials and Enthusiast add a lot of capabilities to do things like add words to a design, merge designs, edit colors, flip designs, etc.  These are all the things you would want to do if you wanted to work with stitch files you may have purchased.  Stitch Artist is the module which is used to create new designs.  This is where we will focus our attention.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual for the software can be downloaded here: [https://embrilliance.com/downloads downloads].  The manual contains information about all of the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download a [https://embrilliance.com/demonstration-versions demo] version of Embrilliance to practice at home with.  It works on both PCs and Macs so be sure to pick the right version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4132</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4132"/>
		<updated>2019-12-08T00:03:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART, PE-Design NEXT and Embrilliance.  This Wiki will only cover digitizing with Embrilliance.  If you are interested in using PE-Design NEXT or SewART, please see the Resources below for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.  Embrilliance is installed on at least the Textiles PC and the two laptops available for general use in the front office.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Resources =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embrilliance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4063</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4063"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T21:59:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Basic Concepts */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART and PE-Design NEXT.  This Wiki will address PE-Design NEXT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever digitizing software you use will likely store its intermediate data in a proprietary format so that you can save and edit a design as needed.  PE-Design files are stored in XXX.  When you're ready to create a stitch file, you do XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could create an embroidery design by choosing the location of each stitch by hand.  I believe this is called manual punching.  But usually it is easier to start with lines and closed polygons, converting those shapes into lines of stitching or areas to be filled with stitching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example a line could be sewn with a running stitch, a zig-zag stitch, or stitched with a motif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A closed polygon can be filled with a dense satin stitch or a fancy fill pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one more shape that is commonly used: a variable width column, which is much like a zig-zag on a line, but has variable width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the basic building blocks of digitizing.  Aside from manual punching, every design you create will start with lines, polygons, and sometimes variable width columns.  Even text can be broken down into lines, polygons, or variable width columns.  But usually your digitizing software will make adding text seamless.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do we get our Lines and Polygons? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are usually several ways to create lines and polygons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# draw by hand in the software&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in shapes in the software (such as circles or stars)&lt;br /&gt;
# import vector files (from, say, Inkscape)&lt;br /&gt;
# use built-in tools to auto-digitize a very clean image&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all digitizing software will have an auto-digitizing option.  If it does not, you can use Inkscape to create vectors from clean images using the XXX option.  It is suggested that you clean up the vectors first before importing them into your digitizing software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stitch Direction ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Pull-Compensation and Underlay ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tie-Offs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Good Digitizing Practices ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sew from Center Outwards ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digitize for Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4062</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4062"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T21:33:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Introduction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART and PE-Design NEXT.  This Wiki will address PE-Design NEXT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever digitizing software you use will likely store its intermediate data in a proprietary format so that you can save and edit a design as needed.  PE-Design files are stored in XXX.  When you're ready to create a stitch file, you do XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can run SewART and/or PE-Design NEXT from the Textiles PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4061</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4061"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T21:31:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Introduction */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Embroidery digitizing is the process of creating a stitch file for an embroidery machine to sew.  The stitch file can be in one of several formats.  The embroidery machines at TinkerMill use PES and DST formats (less common).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stitch file contains a list of commands telling the embroidery machine where to sew, when to trim the threads, when to switch colors, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process of creating a stitch file is done in digitizing software.  We have SewART and PE-Design NEXT.  This Wiki will address PE-Design NEXT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever digitizing software you use will likely store its intermediate data in a proprietary format so that you can save and edit a design as needed.  PE-Design files are stored in XXX.  When you're ready to create a stitch file, you do XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4060</id>
		<title>Embroidery Digitizing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_Digitizing&amp;diff=4060"/>
		<updated>2019-07-25T21:18:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: Embroidery Digitizing using PE Design NEXT&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Concepts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PE Design NEXT =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Resources ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Textiles&amp;diff=4058</id>
		<title>Textiles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Textiles&amp;diff=4058"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:35:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Embroidery]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Embroidery_6Needle]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Industrial Sewing Machines]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Zig-Zag &amp;amp; Straight Stitch Machines]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Serger]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4057</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4057"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:34:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Applique */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Threads]] and [[#Threading the Needle]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, applique sewing occurs in a few steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew a fabric placement line&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove hoop and apply fabric to cover the placement line (using light machine-embroidery spray adhesive or not)&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew the fabric tack-down line&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove hoop and trim fabric close to the tack-down line&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew the edge treatment (satin stitch, blanket stitch, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This requires that the machine stop between sewing the placement line and tack-down line and between the tack-down line and the edge treatment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get the machine to stop, you can either manually set stop points (see [[#Setting Manual Stops]]) or you can use special embroidery &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; that are automatically interpreted as needing the machine to stop.  These &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; are in the lower right corner of the 8x8 color palette when you are choosing colors for each stitching section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppliqueColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique Material&amp;quot; is used for stitching an outline on the fabric that would be your applique fabric.  You would then unhoop the applique fabric, trim the fabric at or just outside the stitch line and set it aside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique Position&amp;quot; is used for stitching the outline on the background fabric where you would place the applique that you just cut out in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; is then used for the edge treatment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the &amp;quot;Applique Material&amp;quot; color is assumed to be a different color than that of &amp;quot;Applique Position&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; (which are assumed to be the same color).  So you would need to use two different needles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course using these special &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; is not necessary at all if you remember to include manual stops in your sewing.  You can also use any of the &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; colors for any of the steps above.  the machine will automatically stop before sewing these special colors.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cutting out the applique material ahead of time is something of a personal preference.  If your applique material is a tad too small after trimming, the edge treatment may actually miss stitching down the fabric altogether.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applique is addressed starting on page 156 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN PROGRESS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4056</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4056"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:33:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Applique */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Threads]] and [[#Threading the Needle]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, applique sewing occurs in a few steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew a fabric placement line&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove hoop and apply fabric to cover the placement line (using light machine-embroidery spray adhesive or not)&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew the fabric tack-down line&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove hoop and trim fabric close to the tack-down line&lt;br /&gt;
# Sew the edge treatment (satin stitch, blanket stitch, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This requires that the machine stop between sewing the placement line and tack-down line and between the tack-down line and the edge treatment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get the machine to stop, you can either manually set stop points (see [[#Manual Stops]]) or you can use special embroidery &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; that are automatically interpreted as needing the machine to stop.  These &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; are in the lower right corner of the 8x8 color palette when you are choosing colors for each stitching section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AppliqueColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique Material&amp;quot; is used for stitching an outline on the fabric that would be your applique fabric.  You would then unhoop the applique fabric, trim the fabric at or just outside the stitch line and set it aside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique Position&amp;quot; is used for stitching the outline on the background fabric where you would place the applique that you just cut out in the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The color &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; is then used for the edge treatment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the &amp;quot;Applique Material&amp;quot; color is assumed to be a different color than that of &amp;quot;Applique Position&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; (which are assumed to be the same color).  So you would need to use two different needles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course using these special &amp;quot;colors&amp;quot; is not necessary at all if you remember to include manual stops in your sewing.  You can also use any of the &amp;quot;Applique&amp;quot; colors for any of the steps above.  the machine will automatically stop before sewing these special colors.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cutting out the applique material ahead of time is something of a personal preference.  If your applique material is a tad too small after trimming, the edge treatment may actually miss stitching down the fabric altogether.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Applique is addressed starting on page 156 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN PROGRESS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:AppliqueColors.png&amp;diff=4055</id>
		<title>File:AppliqueColors.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:AppliqueColors.png&amp;diff=4055"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:21:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4054</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4054"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:13:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Cap Frame */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Threads]] and [[#Threading the Needle]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
IN PROGRESS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4053</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4053"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:12:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Thread Breaks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Threads]] and [[#Threading the Needle]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4052</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4052"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:11:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Thread Breaks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Threads]] and [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4051</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4051"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:10:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Needle Breaks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[#Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4050</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4050"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:09:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Needle Breaks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the section [[Changing Needles]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4049</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4049"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:07:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Troubleshooting */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the Start/Stop button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing the scissors button, going back a few stitches using the needle -/+ button on the screen, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  Use the Birds Nest Sewing Tool Kit in the yellow zippered container.  It is in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  '''The blade is very sharp so be very careful!'''  Hook the threads to pull it slightly towards you.  Then use the knife to cut through all of the threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads on your fabric.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.  Removing the needle plate is described starting on page 184 in the Operations Manual.  You will need to use the offset screwdriver which is in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in the small toolbox in the 6-Needle Embroidery Box, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread breaks during sewing, the machine will likely stop on its own.  Thread the machine from the point of breakage and continue sewing.  (You might want to go back about 20 stitches first).  If the thread continues to break, you can consider sewing at a slower speed or changing threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please leave a note with the thread cone to let others know that it is prone to breaking and should likely be replaced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png&amp;diff=4048</id>
		<title>File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:RemoveNeedlePlate.png&amp;diff=4048"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T16:03:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4047</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4047"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:49:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Start Sewing! */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are ready to start sewing, double-check that you have your threads loaded properly and your needles threaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button on the screen (in the lower left corner).  The Start/Stop button should turn green.  If it does not, follow the instructions on the screen and try again.  If you do not see the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button, it is likely you are not on the right screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LockButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Start/Stop button is green, you can press it to begin sewing.  You can stop sewing at any time by pressing the button again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will continue until embroidery is completed or until the next manual stop or until the threads need to be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Happy Sewing!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the XXX button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing XXX, going back a few stitches using the XXX buttons, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  You will need a nice sharp, flat blade to slice through the thread nest.  (We really need a hook and knife set XXX!!!)  Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in XXX, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LockButton.png&amp;diff=4046</id>
		<title>File:LockButton.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:LockButton.png&amp;diff=4046"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:47:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4045</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4045"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:41:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Setting Manual Stops */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the machine to stop before sewing any particular section of your design, you can assign manual stops.  This may be helpful for doing applique or for sewing in-the-hoop projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the screen where you can apply colors to each stitching section, you can select the &amp;quot;Hand&amp;quot; button. This will cause the machine to stop '''before''' the section is stitched.  (See page 91 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ManualStops.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the little hand (1) which is displayed with the thread color.  Press &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you have finished setting manual stops.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the XXX button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing XXX, going back a few stitches using the XXX buttons, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  You will need a nice sharp, flat blade to slice through the thread nest.  (We really need a hook and knife set XXX!!!)  Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in XXX, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ManualStops.png&amp;diff=4044</id>
		<title>File:ManualStops.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=File:ManualStops.png&amp;diff=4044"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:40:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4043</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4043"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:35:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the small toolbox inside the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the XXX button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing XXX, going back a few stitches using the XXX buttons, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  You will need a nice sharp, flat blade to slice through the thread nest.  (We really need a hook and knife set XXX!!!)  Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in XXX, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4042</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4042"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:26:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* Other Issues */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the XXX button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing XXX, going back a few stitches using the XXX buttons, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  You will need a nice sharp, flat blade to slice through the thread nest.  (We really need a hook and knife set XXX!!!)  Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in XXX, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are seeing skipped stitches, you may want to set the tail length to something longer.  See page 2 of the Settings (and page 150 in the Operations Manual).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a Troubleshooting section in the Operations Manual starting on page 190.  You can consult this or you can reach out to the embroidery team on the #sewing-embroidery channel on Slack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4041</id>
		<title>Embroidery 6Needle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tinkermill.org/index.php?title=Embroidery_6Needle&amp;diff=4041"/>
		<updated>2019-07-24T15:23:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;LynneN: /* DST Settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Introduction ==&lt;br /&gt;
This Wiki describes the Baby Lock EMP6 on loan to TinkerMill.  Its sister machine is the Brother PR600.  They have different built-in designs.  Otherwise, they are functionally equivalent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can embroider designs with multiple colors.  Designs with 6 or fewer colors will not require any thread changes once the machine has been set up.  Designs with more than 6 colors will require re-threading the machine as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The display is a touch screen.  Please use either your finger or a simple plastic stylus and be gentle!  This is an older machine so it sometimes takes longer to respond than you would like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Hoop Sizes ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported hoop sizes are:&lt;br /&gt;
* 40 mm x 60 mm (1-1/2&amp;quot; x 2-3/8&amp;quot;) - good for small monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* 100 mm x 100 mm (4&amp;quot; x 4&amp;quot;) - good for many logos&lt;br /&gt;
* 130 mm x 180 mm (5-1/8&amp;quot; x 7-1/8&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
* 200 mm x 300 mm (7-7/8&amp;quot; x 11-3/4&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also a cap frame for designs that are 50 mm x 130 mm (2&amp;quot; x 5 1/8&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Embroidery Thread Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manufacturer suggests the use of 40 weight polyester or rayon embroidery threads.  You are asked to use only the embroidery threads provided in the textiles shop.  General purpose sewing threads are not to be used for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Many different brands of thread have been used successfully on this machine.  However not all threads will perform well due to age or other issues.  Please pay attention to the machine during embroidery in case the machine runs into any problems.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Supported Stitch File Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will read PES, PHC (less common), and DST formats.  If the embroidery design is larger than will fit in the largest supported hoop size, it will NOT be recognized by the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And as a note, DST formats carry no color information in them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Certification ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''You will need to be certified on the 6-needle before you can use it with the standard hoops.  An additional certification will be required to use the cap frame.'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manuals from Brother ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The original Baby Lock Operations Manual and Quick Reference Manual are located in the plastic box labeled &amp;quot;Baby Lock 6-Needle&amp;quot;.  You can download PDFs of the Brother equivalents here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_OperationsManual.PDF|PR600 Operations Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_QuickReference.pdf|PR600 Quick Reference]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:File:PR600_ServiceManual.pdf|PR600 Service Manual]] (to be used by shop captains only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Steps Before Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turn on Machine and Oil the Raceway ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The power switch for the machine is on the base on the right hand side towards the back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the machine is on, you will be reminded to put a drop of oil on the raceway before embroidery.  Please do this.  You can use the precision oiler located in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  Only '''one''' drop is needed!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the same time, check for lint.  You can use the brush and the tweezers in the small accessory box to clean out the bobbin area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be warned that the embroidery arms will move.  Press OK and let the machine do its thing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be shown the opening screen.  From here, you can import your design(s) and start setting things up for embroidery.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operations Flow ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several steps you will go through before you can actually start sewing:&lt;br /&gt;
# Select / create a single design (import from PC or other media such as floppy disk or choose from built-in) and press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Merge other designs (if desired) and arrange them followed by selecting &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the combined designs (if desired) followed by selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Thread each needle with the directed color and press &amp;quot;Unlock&amp;quot; when ready to sew&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is an overview of this basic operation flow on page 22 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (1) Selecting Built-In Designs ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From top to bottom, left to right:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in designs (last design on last page is a tension test design)&lt;br /&gt;
** Built in decorative frames&lt;br /&gt;
** Letters (from which you can create words in 3 different sizes)&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 2 (different from what is shown above)&lt;br /&gt;
** Fancy script letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Multi-colored fancy letters&lt;br /&gt;
** Monograms&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from built-in memory (i.e. the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from Compact Flash card&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve patterns from floppy disk&lt;br /&gt;
* Row 4&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from connected PC&lt;br /&gt;
** Retrieve pattern from Brother Embroidery Card&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several pages of built-in designs.  You can page through them by selecting the &amp;quot;hands&amp;quot; buttons as shown below.  You can tap on each design to see a preview.  Once you have a pattern selected, press &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PatternSelectionPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Words ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main screen, choose the letters button on the top row.  Then choose a font to use.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseAFont.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then choose individual letters to form a word.  Be sure to select the size you wish to use right after you select your first letter.  The button to select the size is &amp;quot;LMS&amp;quot; (Large Medium Small) on the right side of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChooseYourLetters.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button on the right side of the screen, you can put your word on an arc or a slanted line.  You can adjust the curve using the two buttons shown on the bottom of the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PutWordOnArc.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; depending on which screen you are on.  You will have more options to change the letter spacing and the colors of the letters on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Creating Monograms ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating monograms works in a similar fashion.  You use the tabs at the bottom of the letter selection screens to choose your left, middle, and right letters.  Then select &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (2) Editing Designs and Merging New Ones ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have selected a design or created a new word or monogram and hit the &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot; button, you will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditingOptionsPerDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, you can merge (or add in) new designs and you can edit the individual designs in your collection to form a new arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select between your designs using the left and right arrows labeled &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each design, you can move the design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons on the left side.  Hitting the center button will return the design to the center of the hoop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reflect your design, resize it (within a small range), or rotate the design.  If the selected design is a word or monogram, you can adjust the spacing between letters by selecting the &amp;quot;Spacing&amp;quot; button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LetterSpacingScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice button (4) in the lower left.  You can choose to have the machine cut the threads between each letter by selecting this button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring back to the prior image...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can put the word on a slanted line or an arc using the &amp;quot;Array&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to choose a different color for each letter in your word or monogram, select the &amp;quot;Multi Color&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Density&amp;quot; button to change the density of the stitching.  Density is relative to 100% so it is not really clear what the actual range of values is in, say, stitches per mm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the button in the lower right with the thread icon to change the colors in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ChangingThreadColors.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (2) refers to the total number of color changes in the denominator and the current color in the numerator.  You can navigate between color changes using buttons (3) and (4).  To assign a new color to the current selection, use the arrow buttons in (5) and then press the Set button (6).  If you forget to Set the color, your new selection will not be saved.  The color palette in (7) is typically the Brother Embroidery colors.  You can create custom palettes as is suggested by (10), but that is not covered in this Wiki.  You can consult the Operations Manual for more information.  If you would like the machine to stop '''before''' it sews the current selection, press the hand button (8).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished choosing new colors, press the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to resize the design, select the &amp;quot;Size&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ResizeDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The buttons on the left side of the panel allow you to shrink or expand your design (within some limit) in each direction independently or in both directions.  If you want to return the design to its original size, use button (7).  When you are finished select OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (3) Editing the Designs as a Group ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you have merged as many designs as you wish, select &amp;quot;Edit End&amp;quot;.  You will come to the following screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EditCombinedDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you can edit the designs as a group.  You can also save the design (use the &amp;quot;pocket&amp;quot; button), return to the previous edit screen (use the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; button), preview the design (use the &amp;quot;hoop&amp;quot; button) or cancel all of your current work (use the &amp;quot;Quit&amp;quot; button).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move the combined design around using the 3x3 grid of arrow buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can rotate the designs as a group using the &amp;quot;Rotate All&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RotateDesign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note button (3) - this is the framing button.  It causes the hoop (if attached) to be moved so that you can see the general outline of the area that will be stitched.  It is like the &amp;quot;Frame&amp;quot; button on the laser cutter.  To follow the outline, keep an eye on the needle that is currently in the sewing position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button when you are finished with rotation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; button in the prior image to duplicate your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RepeatDesigns.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Uses buttons (1) to (4) to increase and decrease the number of repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Use (9) to return to just a single copy of the design.  Buttons (5) to (8) will increase and decrease the spacing between repetitions in the horizontal and vertical directions.  Select &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Going back to the first image in this section, you can change thread colors as we have mentioned before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two buttons with the dotted lines and the little squares are for turning on and off automatic lock stitches.  The one on the left is for adding a lock stitch at the beginning of a new sewing section (i.e. right after a thread trim or the start of a new color).  The one on the right is for the end of a section (i.e. right before a thread trim).  These are good settings to have on unless you know that your design was digitized with lock stitches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sewing speed is controlled by the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;-&amp;quot; buttons.  Please leave the machine speed at 600 rpm even though it can sew faster.  You will get a nicer stitch-outs at slower speeds and place less stress on the thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The button with the square and two needles at the corners is for connecting designs automatically.  This is described starting on page 87 in the Operations Manual and is beyond the scope of this Wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished editing your design as a group, select the &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== (4) Sewing ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting &amp;quot;Sewing&amp;quot; in the previous step, you are presented with a new screen.  The following are two presentations of the same screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryScreen.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine will prompt you to change or load the threads you need (not shown above).  Press OK and then proceed with changing the threads.  Select the number next to each thread color (9).  The machine will position the selected needle over the sewing arm.  In this position, you can use the automatic needle threader.  Changing the thread is covered in a different section below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) show you which section will be stitched next, the colors coming up and their associated needles.  Item (4) indicates that the machine will stop after sewing Yellow and prompt you to change threads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (5) tells you how many color changes there will be (in the denominator) and which color we are currently sewing.  This is not the needle position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (6) tells you the total stitch count in the denominator and the total number of stitches sewn so far in the numerator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (7) gives you the total expected stitching time in the denominator and the amount of time already spent stitching in the numerator.  I find that these values are just estimates and usually underestimate the time sewn and time remaining.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (8) tells you how long to before the next thread change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (10) tells you which thread colors belong on which needle and the buttons in (9) will cause the machine to reposition the selected needle over the sewing arm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Item (11) is the sewing speed.  Please leave this at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Reserve Stop&amp;quot; button (12) can be pressed while the machine is sewing.  If you do so, the machine will stop *after* the current color is finished.  At that point, you can override the color assigned to the next section to by selecting button (14) and choosing the next color to sew with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Button (15) can be used to move forward or backward a number of stitches (see below).  You can also skip to the next color or go back to a previous color (use the buttons with the spool of thread and + or -).  The needle with the &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; takes you back to the beginning of the design.  You will use these options when you have a thread break or any other kind of stoppage that requires you to cut the threads and start over again a few stitches back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStitches.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are sure all of your threads are loaded and no thread tails are hanging in a safe location, you can press the &amp;quot;Lock&amp;quot; button (16).  The Start/Stop button will turn green (shown below).  You can press this button and begin sewing.  Stop the machine at any time and continue by selecting Start again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalButtons.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The middle button is the thread trimming button.  Press once to trim the threads.  The right button is the needle threading button which is discussed later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing Designs from PC or External Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have three options:&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from PC using USB cable (easiest)&lt;br /&gt;
* transfer from floppy disk (2HD Windows Formatted only) &lt;br /&gt;
* transfer using the Brother Embroidery Card (there is only one so don't lose it!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PC Transfer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure the embroidery machine is connected to the Textiles PC.  On the PC, there should be a USB Drive with either no files or only embroidery files on it.  If the SE400 is also on, there may be two USB Drives available.  You can copy embroidery files to the USB Drive.  These will be accessible from the embroidery machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the embroidery machine, select the PC/USB button.  In the next window, choose your embroidery file to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2HD Floppy Disk ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer via floppy disk, copy your embroidery files (PES, PHC, or DST format) to a 2HD Windows formatted floppy disk.  Files saved in folders will NOT be displayed on the embroidery machine.  Only insert or remove floppy disks while the floppy disk icon is in the display or while the embroidery machine is OFF.  Once the floppy disk has been inserted, you can choose designs from your disk to embroider.  See pages 117-118 in the BabyLock Manual.  As of this writing (7/2019), the floppy disk drive on the embroidery machine has not been recently tested.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Using the Embroidery Card ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the Embroidery Card, you will need to use the PE Design NEXT Software and its &amp;quot;dongle&amp;quot; on the Textiles PC to compute.  This will be covered in the PE Design training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Embroidery ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Managing Threads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you purchase or create your own design, chances are you have specific thread colors in mind.  Purchased designs are often created with a certain manufacturer's thread line.  And you may have had certain colors in mind when you created your own design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The reality is that you need to stitch your design with the colors available whether at TinkerMill or elsewhere.  At TinkerMill, we have the official Brother colors plus some extras.  There are really only 61 Brother colors displayed on the EMP6.  There are options to create your own custom palettes (presumably to match the colors you have on hand) and you can change the displayed colors to that of a few other manufacturers.  However, these color palettes are likely not up to date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you load in your embroidery design, the machine's software will do the best it can to choose what it thinks is a close match to your color.  (If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information contained in the file.)  It is likely that the machine will choose colors that don't look quite right to your eye.  You can do one of two things.  You can set the colors by hand for each section of stitching.  This will make the displayed embroidery design look closer to the final product.  Or you can completely ignore the assigned colors on the machine, knowing that you need to put the correct color on each needle based on the assignment of needles to stitching sections.  The machine has no idea what color you are using with each needle and doesn't care so it is up to you to get this right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key here is to know what color you should be using for each section of stitching.  It is extremely helpful to have a print out (or other electronic form of the same) that shows the stitching order and the stitching colors.  Use this to choose the actual thread colors you will be using in your design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Color Names and Numbers ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine is typically set up to display just the name of the Brother Embroidery color.  However, the TinkerMill spools have color numbers.  You can see the thread color number instead by using the Settings button and switching to &amp;quot;Embroidery&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Name of Color&amp;quot;.  See page 145 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Settings button is in the upper left corner of most screens.  The only time you cannot access the Settings is during sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reusing Threads Already Loaded ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have colors loaded on the machine that you would like to use in your next design to sew, you can &amp;quot;lock&amp;quot; the thread to the needle.  The machine will remember these locked colors and will not require you to reload the same color on a different needle for your next design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To lock or unlock colors to needles, go to page 3 of the Settings (and page 94 in the Operations Manual).  Select the needle you want to lock.  Choose the associated color from the palette to the right and hit &amp;quot;Set&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedle.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReservedNeedleExample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An anchor will be displayed with the locked needle indicating that the color is now locked to the needle.  It will remain in this state even after the machine is turned off and on again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Changing Threads ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing threads is easiest to do when you have the tail of the old thread to work with.  In this case, tie the new thread to the old with a single knot.  Make sure it is snug.  Pull the old thread out of the eye of the needle.  Then gently but firmly pull the thread through until the new thread makes an appearance.  Pull out about 8&amp;quot; of the new thread and snip off the old thread.  Then thread the needle following the procedure in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And if you need to thread the machine from scratch, see the instructions in the Operations Manual starting on page 35.  The machine has some guidelines on it to help.  Threads need to go under the little metal clips.  Be sure to keep the thread on the correct indicated side of the metal posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to wind the thread around the tension disks just once in the correct direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two metal plates under the tension knob and the thread needs to pass between them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When threading the front of the machine where the uptake levers are, make sure the thread is sitting in the proper channels and is not caught on anything.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath3b.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pass the thread through the small hole above the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use tweezers or the needle changing tool to get the thread over the hook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ThreadPath5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the thread is not installed properly, the machine will likely sense a tension problem and stop.  You will then need to carefully inspect the thread path.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Threading the Needle ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Needles can be threaded by hand with a good eye and steady hand.  You can also use the automatic needle threader.  This is described starting on page 39 in the Operations Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you need to select the needle to thread.  The machine should reposition itself so that the needle is in the sewing position (over the embroidery arm).  Pull out a good length of thread from the bottom, maybe 8&amp;quot; or so.  Press the needle threading button on the display (this is the right-most physical button just below the touch screen).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items (1), (2), and (3) shown below become engaged.  The forks (2) should be on either side of the needle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AutomaticNeedleThreader.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then lay the thread across the needle under the forks from right to left and to the left of (3).  Pull the remaining tail up and over the thread cutter (4) and cut the thread by pulling down in the direction shown.  Then press the needle threader button one more time.  The thread should be pulled through the eye and up into the thread catch behind the needles.  If the thread tail is hanging loose, just hook it up and over the cutter (4) and leave it there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bobbins ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the bobbin is empty, the machine will automatically detect this situation and will stop.  Go ahead and cut the threads.  '''There is no need to remove the hoop!'''  Just reach underneath your sewing and remove the bobbin case and the bobbin from the machine.  (See page 18 in the Operations Manual).  Be gentle with the thread picker.  It does not need much to move it out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:RemoveBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We use magnetic pre-wound bobbins.  They can be found in the 6-needle embroidery box in a cardboard box marked &amp;quot;Bobbins&amp;quot;.  Select either white or black.  The magnetic core forces you to insert the bobbin in the correct direction as it sticks to the bobbin case when properly inserted.  '''Please return the empty magnetic core to the box as these can be returned to the manufacturer to be reused.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new bobbin in the case and return the case to the machine.  Leave about a 2&amp;quot; tail.  It will stick out of the bobbin cover, but that is okay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InsertBobbin3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go back a few stitches (about 20) and restart your sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Changing Needles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change any of the needles, you will need to use two tools that are in the small toolbox.  One holds the needle in place and the other loosens the screw holding the needle in.  Loosen this screw only as much as you need, otherwise a small piece will fall out and likely be lost.  Instructions are on page 61 in the BabyLock Operations Manual.  '''You will need to have the hoop OFF in order to change the needle.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReplaceNeedle2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Extra needles are in the small toolbox.  Please record in the Maintenance Records the date you changed the needle and the needle number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Recommended needle types are Organ HAX 130 EBBR or Schmetz 130/705 H-E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Stabilizing the Fabric ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many types of stabilizers and the right type to use depends on several factors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Type of fabric&lt;br /&gt;
* Stitch count / density of design&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the finished backside to look like&lt;br /&gt;
* What you need the front side to look like&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a list of common types of stabilizers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* no-show fusible mesh (lightweight fusible)&lt;br /&gt;
* medium weight cut-away or tear-away (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
* paper-backed sticky stabilizers (cut-away or tear-away)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble film stabilizers (light and heavy weight)&lt;br /&gt;
* water soluble mesh lightweight stabilizers (fusible or not)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally speaking, you want the fabric to be as stiff as possible during embroidery. For light, airy designs with few areas of dense stitching, you'll need less stabilization than a denser design.  Dense stitching will tend to increase the amount of puckering that occurs so the fabric needs to be held in place more strongly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you are sewing a dense design on a light T-shirt, you will need the fabric not to shift during embroidery so you'll likely want to use a fusible stabilizer with enough weight to support a lot of stitches.  (You can double-up on light-weight fusibles to make it heavier overall).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are sewing on a stiffer fabric like canvas, you'll need less stabilization and it wouldn't have to be a fusible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need the backside to be clean (i.e. minimal to no stabilizer showing after embroidery), then you could use a tear away or water soluble stabilizer.  A tear away works nicely when your design allows you to remove it in big chunks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't need the backside to be perfectly clean, a cut-away stabilizer works nicely.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to keep the fabric from shifting, you will need to use a fusible, paper-backed sticky, or water stick stabilizer.  Fusibles are the most common and are applied with an iron.  Be careful to look for the slightly shiny side - that is the side with the fusible.  You don't want to fuse the stabilizer to the iron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fabrics like towels or Minky are difficult to hoop and can be held in place with a paper-backed sticky stabilizer.  Only the stabilizer is hooped.  The protective paper covering is removed after hooping and the fabric is pressed onto the sticky paper.  Sometimes the weight of the fabric still tends to pull the fabric away from the adhesive.  In those cases, you can try using the binder clips to hold the fabric to the sides of the hoop.  Or you can try pinning the fabric to the stabilizer well away from the anticipated sewing area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the embroidery is to be done on fabric with some pile (like a towel or Minky), then you will want to use a light weight water soluble stabilizer on the top.  These can be applied during hooping (though your paper pattern would be trapped underneath it) or they can be applied after hooping and pinned in place.  Keep those pins well away from the sewing area!  The water soluble stabilizer will help keep the stitches from falling into the pile.  If this ends up not being enough, you could use tulle as a &amp;quot;topper&amp;quot;.  You need to select a color that matches your fabric.  After sewing, you would need to tear the tulle away from the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For free-standing lace (FSL) designs you would need to stitch on heavy weight water soluble stabilizer.  You can use a few layers of lighter weight water soluble stabilizers as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you find during stitching that you need more stabilizer, you can &amp;quot;float&amp;quot; a sheet under the hoop.  To do this, stop the machine and have it cut the threads.  Take a piece of stabilizer and cut it to the right size.  Slip it under the hoop, roughly centered.  Go back about 20 stitches and restart the sewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Hooping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select a stabilizer to use and apply it to your fabric.  Now we can proceed to hooping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are trying to embroider your design at a specific location on your fabric, then I suggest the following.  Print your embroidery design at full resolution.  You can use the XXX software on the textiles PC to do so.  The printed version should have a set of lines marking the center of the design horizontally and vertically.  Cut around the design and the center lines.  Pin the paper copy of the design onto your fabric where you want it to embroider.  Pin it in at least a couple places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now take the top hoop (the one with the arms extending to the sides to attach to the machine) and center it over the fabric.  Line up the center lines of the design with the center lines on the insides of the hoop.  Carefully grab the fabric and the hoop together with both hands, trying hard not to shift the fabric.  Now locate the bottom hoop and press the top hoop/fabric into the bottom hoop.  Try to keep the fabric from rotating.  If you end up with the design shifted somewhat, that's okay and can be compensated for on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bottom hoop needs to just remain level with the bottom of the top hoop.  There's no need to push it up any higher.  Tighten the screw.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching the Hoop ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each hoop has arms that extend a different amount.  You may need to change the position of the embroidery arm on the machine for the hoop you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only the left embroidery arm can be adjusted.  Locate the two knobs on the back of the left arm and loosen them.  Then shift the arm left or right as needed.  The arm will click in place at one of several positions.  Choose the one that fits the hoop you are using.  Tighten the two knobs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EmbroideryArmAdjustment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To attach the hoop, slip the ends under the clips until the hoop snaps into place on the posts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AttachHoop2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you consider that the hoop forms a bucket, make sure that the bottom of the bucket (where your fabric is) is '''down'''.  Do not attach the hoop like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HoopUpsideDown.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the option, try to keep as much loose fabric to the front of the machine as possible.  This may mean that you end up embroidering your design upside-down.  That is fine.  You can shift and rotate your design on the machine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert the two sides of the hoop under the metal clips on each arm.  They should lock in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clear the sewing area under the hoop!  Secure the fabric behind the hoop.  If you have a lot of loose fabric behind the hoop, you might want to use some binder clips to hold the fabric bunched up and in place so that it doesn't interfere with the embroidery.  There are binder clips in the 6-Needle Embroidery box.  You can do a frame check to make sure the embroidery arm can move freely and the loose fabric is out of the way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the paper design and all pins from the hoop and you should be ready to sew.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sewing Speed ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The machine can stitch from 600 to 1000 rpm when using the embroidery frames.  However, it will do a better job stitching at slower speeds and will cause less wear and tear on the machine.  Please keep it set at 600 rpm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using the cap frame, the suggested sewing speed is 400 rpm.  Cap frame embroidery requires separate certification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== DST Settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a DST formatted stitch file, there is no color information in the file and you will have to manually assign a color to each stitch section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, a DST file has a sequence of &amp;quot;jump&amp;quot; stitches that are used to traverse from one area of stitching to the next.  Using the Settings on page 2 (and page 149 in the Operations Manual), you can can convert the jump stitches to a trim command.  However, you need to match the number of jump stitches to that used when the file was originally created.  For this reason, it is better to use a PES formatted file if you have the opportunity to do so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setting Manual Stops ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Start Sewing! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Finished! ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished sewing, clip the threads right above the spool, leaving the tail hanging.  Return the spools to the thread rack and '''please attach a small blue clip to the end of the thread to keep it hanging down.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's easy to stop the machine while it is sewing - just press on the XXX button.  At this point you can just continue start it up again.  Or you can cut the threads by pressing XXX, going back a few stitches using the XXX buttons, and starting up again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there happens to be a power outage during stitching, the machine will remember what it was doing.  The next time it is powered on, you will be asked if you want to resume sewing.  If you choose to, you might want to cut the threads, go back about 20 stitches, and start up again.  This gives the machine a chance to catch the bobbin thread.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Nests ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the most common sort of error you may run into.  You may end up with a big wad of tangled threads under your hoop.  The machine will detect that it can no longer move freely and will usually stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Taking care of this problem usually involves carefully lifting up the hoop to peer underneath it.  There is no need to remove the hoop yet (and you probably can't anyway).  You will need a nice sharp, flat blade to slice through the thread nest.  (We really need a hook and knife set XXX!!!)  Once you have the threads detached, remove the hoop from the machine and clean up all of those loose threads.  You will also need to clean out the bobbin area of all loose threads.  If you can't get to all of them from the bobbin area, you may need to remove the needle plate and clean it out from the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once everything is cleaned out, re-insert the bobbin, reattach the hoop to the embroidery arm, go back a few stitches (or more), and start over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Needle Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the needle breaks, you will need to insert a new one.  But first, snip the thread and pull through a long tail.  Remove the broken needle.  If part of the needle appears to have been lost under the needle plate, you will need to locate the errant piece and remove it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove the broken needle by XXX, locate a new one in XXX, and replace it in the machine by doing XXX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Thread Breaks ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other Issues ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cap Frame ==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>LynneN</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>